Download Owners Manual - Dealer e
Transcript
Challenger 2010 OWNER’ S MANUAL I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby: SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 10 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INTRODUCTION 1 CONTENTS 䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6 䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about your satisfaction. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual: with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INTRODUCTION 5 1 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN Location Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. vehicle registration, and the title. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ Remote Open Window Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 䡵 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 42 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 44 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 46 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 ▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 53 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 70 11 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position. Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterAnd Operating” for further information. N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/ RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. 1 2 3 4 — OFF — ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY) — ON/RUN — START NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. then pull the key out with your other hand. With the Keyless Enter-N-Go system, the EVIC will display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Emergency Key Removal Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. into the lock cylinders with either side up. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. 15 Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob. NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position. If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SENTRY KEY姞 The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition possible by an authorized dealer. Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. CAUTION! Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an ible with some after-market remote starting systems. invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- problems and loss of security protection. tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed. vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to CAUTION! the authorized dealer. Replacement Keys • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to place the ignition in OFF. Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer. General Information The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions: with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference. required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • This device must accept any interference that may be off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off received, including interference that may cause unde- after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself. sired operation. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash. To Arm The System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if both doors and the trunk are closed, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to arming period, the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-described arming sequences. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button until the trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters that the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further alarm will sound. information). Then either press the power door LOCK • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior switch while the driver or passenger door is open, or power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your button. vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the To Disarm The System Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go of the previously-described arming sequences has ocEither press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch. whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this NOTE: occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery Security Alarm. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. switch is placed in ON/RUN from the OFF position. Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle), or insert a valid downward position), unless the overhead map/reading Key Fob into the ignition switch (if the Start/Stop button lights are turned on manually. is removed) and rotate it to the ON/RUN position. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) Tamper Alert The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from disyour absence, the horn will sound three times when you tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does tampering. not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the ignition switch disables the system from responding transmitter or open any door. to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. RKE transmitters. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: Key Fob with RKE Transmitter 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice 2. Release both buttons at the same time. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • When not using the EVIC, perform the following ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter steps: with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Fob removed. RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while its previous setting. still holding the UNLOCK button. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. to deactivate the Security Alarm. Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: 1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by presster to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed. Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be its previous setting. turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph Remote Open Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both door (24 km/h) or greater. windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and NOTE: release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the until the windows lower to the level desired or until they Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights lower completely. and horn will remain on. To Open The Trunk • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the times within five seconds to open the trunk. Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted Using The Panic Alarm by the system. To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. performed at an authorized dealer. 3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ operation. perchlorate General Information 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the following conditions: RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the • This device may not cause harmful interference. elastomer seal during removal. Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. 2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on operation. the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- How To Use Remote Start proved by the party responsible for compliance could All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • distance, check for these two conditions: • 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of • the battery is a minimum of three years. • 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. • Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) • Ignition key removed from ignition switch REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Battery at an acceptable charge level, and (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • RKE PANIC button not pressed. maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. 27 NOTE: • If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later. • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode. • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or To Enter Remote Start Mode the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN Press and release the REMOTE START button position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a on the RKE transmitter twice, within five secthird cycle. onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN • Press and release the REMOTE START button one time position in order to drive the vehicle. or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go cycle. feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display in the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN. Start request. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feaTo Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle ture, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will disBefore the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the play in the EVIC until you push the START button. UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position. To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward. Door Lock Knob 29 If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met: 1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2. The transmission is in gear 3. All doors are closed Power Door Lock Switch 4. The throttle is pressed If you press the power door lock switch while the Key 5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h) Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming transmitter The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforAutomatic Door Locks — If Equipped The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customeryour authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inprogramming. strument Panel” for further information. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if: • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. abled 2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch. 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed 3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) OFF and ON/RUN and then back to OFF four times 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK ending up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the engine. 4. The driver door is opened 5. The doors were not previously unlocked I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors. 5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure. 6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws. Power Window Switches There is a single window control on the passenger’s door WINDOWS trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s door. The window controls will operate only when the Power Windows The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position. the door windows. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage. WARNING! Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. AUTO-Down Feature The driver’s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. 33 To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open the other window to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) will reappear once the trunk is closed. before the button will operate. With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE TRUNK SAFETY WARNING 35 Trunk Emergency Release WARNING! 2 Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold vehicle are the restraint systems: infant and child restraint systems. For more information • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren all passengers (LATCH). • Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenNOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage ger inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different • Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) rates of inflation based on the severity and type of for the driver and passengers seated next to a window collision. — if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as wheel possible. • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event — if equipped I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. 37 of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap. Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snug. • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt. tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Removing Slack From Belt 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. anchor point. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, allow the belt to retract fully. grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinashoulder belt. tion lap/shoulder belt. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 43 WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warning system may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed. 45 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step. NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the BeltAlert威 Programming ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your driver’s seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat authorized dealer or by performing the following steps: belt buckled. NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deNOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn activating the BeltAlert威. on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while 1. With both doors closed, and the ignition switch in any re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s the seat belt. seat belt. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this pro- Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your cedure. authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt extender. This extender should be used only if the Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled. remove the extender and store it. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women WARNING! We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. low and snug and in the recommended seating posiKeep the belt low so that it does not come across the tion. Remove and store the extender when not abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take needed. the force if there is an accident. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. 2 Advanced Front Airbag and Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbags 2 — Knee Bolster NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator NOTE: design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment. inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon Airbag System Components seat position. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front system components: passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • Airbag Warning Light Advanced Front Airbags. • Steering Wheel and Column This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental • Instrument Panel Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win- • Knee Impact Bolster dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they • Driver Advanced Front Airbag are located above the side windows and their covers are • Passenger Advanced Front Airbag also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. 49 WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) — If Equipped SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down- NOTE: ward, covering both windows on the impact side. • Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy. • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 • Being too close to the SABIC airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both driver and the front passenger, and position front occufront and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag Airbags. occupant protection. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved WARNING! protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags • If your vehicle is equipped with left and right also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the high enough to block the location of the SABIC. risk of harm from a deploying airbag: The area where the SABIC is located should reChildren 12 years old and under should always ride main free from any obstructions. buckled up in a rear seat. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need Assistance⬙. WARNING! • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags. 53 WARNING! (Continued) • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls (Continued) Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air- The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and of collision. type of impact. Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi- time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and deployed. type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not exSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all accipected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, collisions. away from an inflating airbag. The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of collisions, including some that may produce substantial the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the hand, depending on the type and location of impact, airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate. Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. 55 WARNING! Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately. Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily Inflator Units or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflacomes on again after initial startup. tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of also record the nature of the malfunction. non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time, Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of (SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped whether or not an airbag should have deployed. During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle. type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Front and Side Impact Sensors • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the the battery has power or until the ignition key is ORC in determining appropriate response to impact removed. events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the • Unlock the doors automatically. level of airbag deployment and provide verification. If a Deployment Occurs Enhanced Accident Response System The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if after deployment. the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all event the ORC will determine whether to have the collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- the airbag system. ing functions: If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any • Cut off fuel to the engine. or all of the following may occur: • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrauntil the ignition key is turned off. sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deThey are not permanent and normally heal quickly. ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a airbags will not be in place to protect you. few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor WARNING! immediately. • As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Airbag System 59 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately. • The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may were buckled/fastened; not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Child Restraints These data can help provide a better understanding of Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. time, including babies and children. Every state in the NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States and all Canadian provinces require that non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. sonal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are Children 12 years and younger should ride properly recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcebuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in personally identifying data routinely acquired during a the rear seats rather than in the front. crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Infants and Child Restraints WARNING! In an collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child. • Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant carriers and convertible child seats. • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. 63 The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint: • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. • • • • 65 Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle weight and height limits. structure. Carefully follow the instructions that come with the LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now availrestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be not work when you need it. introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems Buckle the child into the seat according to the child having attachments for those anchorages will continue to restraint manufacturer’s directions. have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the connection to the top tether anchorages, have been vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle. All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats. You should never install LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rearseating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardare provided with the child restraint system. facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a located at the rear of the seat cushion where it means of adjusting the tension of the strap. meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top surfaces. of the seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorIn addition, there are tether strap anchorages age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing behind each rear seating position located in the the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the panel between the rear seatback and the rear anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to window. These tether strap anchorages are provide the most direct path between the anchor and the under a plastic cover with this symbol on it. child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with push the child restraint rearward and downward into the separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”. 2 To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. To attach a child restraint tether strap: Tether Strap Mounting 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. 1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the 3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to seat where you are placing the child restraint. the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new the strap. vehicle. WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident. Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recomPets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses mended viscosity and quality grades refer to “Mainteor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 CAUTION! WARNING! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow these safety tips: Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Seat Belts feel the air directed against the windshield. See your Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, authorized dealer for service if your defroster is frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced inoperable. immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Floor Mat Safety Information Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the or retractor condition, replace the belt. pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Airbag Warning Light ways. The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 2 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 81 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 82 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 113 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 113 ▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 128 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . 120 ▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ▫ Easy Entry Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 129 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 132 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming 䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : . . . . . 142 . . . . . 143 . . . . 146 . . . . . 147 . . . . . 147 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Partially . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Partially . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards the front of the vehicle. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Folding Mirrors I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position. 83 After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information. Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. Power Mirror Control I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Close the mirror cover to turn off the light. “Slide-On-Rod” and Extender Features of Sun Visor To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward. Illuminated Vanity Mirror I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones. For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following websites: • www.chrysler.com/uconnect Slide-On-Rod Extender • www.dodge.com/uconnect Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED • www.jeep.com/uconnect Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400 lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death. The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to conUconnect™ Phone Button nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Depending on the vehicle options, either the Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your radio or the mirror will contain the two control cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as (Uconnect™ Phone button) and buttons long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to (Voice Command button) that will enthe vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone able you to access the system. allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be Voice Command Button used with the system at a time. The system is available in Actual button location may vary with the raEnglish, Spanish, or French languages. dio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operation” section. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™ Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details. 87 menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another prompt. The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi• For certain operations, compound commands can be cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then can be adjusted either from the radio volume control ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ switch), if so equipped. • For each feature explanation in this section, only the The radio display will be used for visual prompts from combined form of the voice command is given. You the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on can also break the commands into parts and say each certain radios. part of the command when you are asked for it. For Operation example, you can use the combined form voice comVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone combined form command into two voice commands: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Voice Command Tree Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The at any prompt if you ask for help. Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press button and follow the audible prompts for The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone the directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a pairing instructions: button on the radio control head. press of the • Press the button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process. 89 phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section). Dial by Saying a Number • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular • Press the button to begin. phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say given a unique phone name. ⬙Dial.⬙ • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a • The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven, with one being want to call. the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any • For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙. given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number • The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and and then dial. The number will appear in the display then dial the corresponding phone number, which of certain radios. may appear in the display of certain radios. Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook • Press the NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • Press the “Call.⬙ button to begin. • The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say person you want to call. ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙ • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of the name of the person you want to call. For example, long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook instead of ⬙Bob.⬙ or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., ⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book phonebook entry that you are adding. Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones. book, you will be given the opportunity to add more • To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™) phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a main menu. Name” section. The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins names in the phonebook with each name having up to as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is four associated phone numbers and designations. Each made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible start the vehicle. only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook. to the Uconnect™ Phone. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use. Phonebook Download — Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via • Only the phonebook of the currently connected celluBluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonelar phone is accessible. book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威 • Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded. Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send book. these entries from your phone. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or NOTE: deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be • The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transtransfers of phonebook entries to use this feature. ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next • Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they phone connection. are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威, and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address entry that you wish to edit. book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit. drop the Bluetooth威 connection. • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it phonebook entry that you are editing. will only use the first 24 characters. After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in NOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return • Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number to a name entry that already exists in the deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John • Press the button to begin. Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say feature. ⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙ I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you when the vehicle is not in motion. wish to delete. • Press the button to begin. • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙ • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited. • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook button to begin. entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List • Press the Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say from which you choose. To select one of the entries ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙ button while the from the list, press the Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. ⬙Delete.⬙ Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 • Note that only the phonebook in the current language • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the is deleted. number designation you wish to call. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed. deleted or edited. Phone Call Features List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your button to begin. • Press the cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with ⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ your cellular service provider for the features that you • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the have. phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneAnswer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call book entries, if available. Currently in Progress • To call one of the names in the list, press the When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the button during the playing of the desired name, and Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssay ⬙Call.⬙ tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the button to accept the call. To reject the NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ call. Press the operations at this point. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE call, press and hold the button until you hear a by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to single beep, indicating that the incoming call was call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling rejected. Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section. Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold button until you hear incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for To put a call on hold, press the call waiting that you normally hear when using your a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To button to place the current bring the call back from hold, press and hold the cellular phone. Press the button until you hear a single beep. call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call, button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed press the Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), button until you hear a single beep, press the indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Conference Call When two calls are in progress (one active and one on button until you hear a hold), press and hold the double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep. Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established, button until you hear a double press and hold the beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Redial • Press the 3 button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Redial.⬙ • The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Call Termination Uconnect™ Phone. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: Uconnect™ Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is using: • Press the button to begin. • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates the name of the language you wish to switch to cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and English, Espanol, or Francais. transfer of the call to the cellular phone. • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can the language selection. continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language. from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone. • An active call is automatically transferred to the NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languageOFF. specific and usable across all languages. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable: 99 Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area. • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on button and number for your area. some systems. To do this, press the say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your follows: chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly. • Press the button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. NOTE: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and WARNING! To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your cellular phone must be: • turned on, • paired to the Uconnect™ System, • and have network coverage. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance: Paging To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of • Press the button to begin. certain companies, which time out a little too soon to • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone. ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙ Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working NOTE: • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems.⬙ country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- Working with Automated Systems 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- This method is used in instances where one generally has 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour navigating through an automated telephone system. ⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging Towing Assistance references. service or automated customer service line. Some ser• If supported, this number may be programmable on vices require immediate response selection. In some some systems. To do this, press the button and instances, that may be too quick for use of the say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”. Uconnect™ Phone. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying press the a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager. You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to button and say, “Send.” The call and then press the system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. 101 The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone. NOTE: • You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations. This is normal. • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature. Barge In - Overriding Prompts The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to could press the select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Press the button to begin. dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s ⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same play the current confirmation prompt status and you as if you dial the number using Voice Command. will be given the choice to change it. NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by situation, after successfully dialing a number the user your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide may feel that the call did not go through even though the notification to inform you of your phone and network call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will status when you are attempting to make a phone call hear the audio. using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙ In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙ 103 from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙ Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙ with one electronic device at a time. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User’s Manual. Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone button to begin. • Press the The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙ • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to priority phone present in or near (approximately the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. button and phone being announced, press the say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec- Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a • Press the button to begin. paired phone. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say Select Another Cellular Phone ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ This feature allows you to select and start using another • At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone. prompts. • Press the button to begin. • You can also press the button at any time while • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the list is being played, and then choose the phone you ⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts. wish to delete. • You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ Phone Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.” Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures: 105 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts. Voice Command From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to radio mode): provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. • Press and hold the button for five seconds until the session begins, or, • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of you. speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙ • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is during a Voice Command period. not in motion is recommended. • Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. • low-to-medium blower setting, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • fully closed windows, • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). • dry weather condition. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some. • Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced compromised with the convertible top down. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. Phone Far End Audio Performance • Audio quality is maximized under: Bluetooth威 Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode. • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system. • dry weather conditions, and • operation from the driver’s seat. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect™ Phone. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 3 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all Voice Commands Alternate(s) 111 Voice Commands Alternate(s) Primary call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais help home I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no pager pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial Voice Commands Alternate(s) pairing phone book Voice Commands Primary Alternate(s) return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect™ Tutorial try again voice training work yes I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 113 NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level. WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death. VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED button, you When you press the Voice Command will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to command. control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu. options. If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at button, listen a normal speaking volume. options, press the Voice Command for the beep, and say your command. The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is Pressing the Voice Command system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system set to low. will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your change commands. This will become helpful once you commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. start to learn the options. To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Command button and say “Help” or “Main “Help” or “Main Menu”. Menu”. These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 In this mode, you can say the following commands: Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of • “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode) commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) radio mode is active. • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) Changing the Volume • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium button. Wave — If Equipped) To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). this mode, you may say the following commands: 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency” (to change the frequency) system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station) Voice Command is different than the audio system. • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) Main Menu • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) menu. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Radio FM To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Frequency” (to change the frequency) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) Disc To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: Satellite Radio • “Track” (#) (to change the track) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite • “Next Track” (to play the next track) Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) mands: • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) spoken number) • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: 117 − “Previous” (to play the previous memo) − “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the System Setup recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: the following commands: − “Save” (to save the memo) • “Language German” − “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Language Dutch” − “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Language Italian” • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English” — During the playback you may press the Voice • “Language French” button to stop playing memos. You Command • “Language Spanish” proceed by saying one of the following commands: − “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) − “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Tutorial” • “Voice Training” I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System Command of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe before speaking the “Barge In” commands. operation of the vehicle. Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING! nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat button, say “System 1. Press the Voice Command belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Training.” This will train your own voice to the system • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and and will improve recognition. using a seat belt properly. 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” Power Seats session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, The power seat switches are located on the outboard side engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan of the front seat cushions. The power seat switch can be switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new moved forward and backward as well as up and down to user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. control the position of the seat. The power seatback I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback. Push forward or rearward on the switch to change the position of the seatback. 119 WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Power Seat Switches 1 — Power Seat Control 2 — Power Seatback Control I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position. Manual Front Seatback Recline To recline: 1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean back to the desired position and release the handle. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Recline Lever I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support. 121 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact. The head restraints should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower it, press the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint. Lumbar Support Adjustable Head Restraint I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK. Heated Seats The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated. The Heated Seat Switch heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and seatback. The controls for each heater are located near the After placing the ignition in the ON position, you can choose from High, Low or Off heat settings. Amber bottom center of the instrument panel. indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for Off. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off. If high level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. 123 WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and/or degrade the material of the seat. Easy Entry Seats Pulling upward on the lever, located on the seatback, allows the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. Easy Entry Seats Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING! Rear Folding Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood. Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 LIGHTS CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. Headlights and Parking Lights The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. Headlight Switch I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation. Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Automatic Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In Automatic Headlights — If Equipped addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are This system automatically turns the headlights on or off turned off if they were turned on by this feature. according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or (AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Underwill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic Headlight Time Delay system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination position. for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- unlit area. lights will come on in the automatic mode. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off. Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place normal nighttime driving. the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will Lights-On Reminder cancel the delay. If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the turn off in the normal manner. driver when the driver’s door is opened. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds Fog Lights — If Equipped of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this The front fog light switch is built into the headfeature. light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch. Your Instrument Panel” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. 131 High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Flash-to-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec- lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con- will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more released. than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Overhead Console I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Control 133 will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door handles and cupholders. Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off The dimmer control is part of the position. The interior lights will remain off when the headlight switch and is located on the doors are open. left side of the instrument panel. With Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) the parking lights or headlights on, Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. rotating the dimmer control upward This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. CAUTION! Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval. There are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. 135 WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second detent and Headlights On With Wipers (Available with hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. Automatic Headlights Only) If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) and then resume the intermittent interval previously position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when selected. the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the rightcolumn in position, push the control handle inward until side of the steering wheel, operates the system. fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL Electronic Speed Control Lever When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elecaccelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut (40 km/h). down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward to vehicle set speed. SET DECEL and release. Remove your foot from the To Activate accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end selected speed. of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the NOTE: speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push • Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if and release the ON/OFF button again. The system and equipped). the indicator light will turn off. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. • Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact spare tire. To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you: • Softly tap the brake pedal. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 • Press the brake pedal, or press the clutch pedal to the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed floor (manual transmission). will be established. • Pull the speed control lever toward you (CANCEL). Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the 1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory. tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). To Resume Speed To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set, If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle in SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SET speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to until the lever is released. Release the lever when the RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be from the accelerator pedal. established. To Vary the Speed Setting Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Control. Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills WARNING! NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have a collision. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) button and a power sunroof switch may also be included, if equipped. 141 Courtesy/Reading Lights At the forward end of the overhead console are two courtesy/reading lights. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. Overhead Console The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s battery. The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels. HomeLink威 Buttons NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. • Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and cause you and others to be severely injured or killed. NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call 143 toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. Programming HomeLink姞 Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons, erase all channels before you begin training. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.” It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat while training. Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the handheld transmitter. 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The 2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) garage door may open and close while you train. from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers display in view. may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted For optimal training, point the battery end of the handin the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. held transmitter away from the HomeLink威. 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If 3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINTRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.” ING” repeat Step 3. Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld transmitter buttons. NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.” Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “Learn” or “Training” button. 3 This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door). 1 — Garage Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two designed to “time-out” in the same manner. seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling activates, programming is complete. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage If the device does not activate, press the button a third door or gate motor. time (for two seconds) to complete the training. If you are having difficulties programming a garage door If you have any problems, or require assistance, please opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink” Step 3 with the following: www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC erase the channels. display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to Gate Operator/Canadian Programming “CHANNEL # TRAINED.” Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in transmission – which may not be long enough for at this time. HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. HomeLink威” earlier in this section. Using HomeLink姞 To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. follow these steps: Troubleshooting Tips 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for are some of the most common solutions: 20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # • Replace the battery in the original transmitter. TRAINING.” Do not release the button. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired complete the training for rolling code. operation. • Did you unplug the device for training, and remember NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies to plug it back in? with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not If you are having any problems or require assistance, expressly approved by the party responsible for compliplease call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at ance could void the user’s authority to operate the www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. device. General Information The term “IC:” before the certification/registration numThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifiCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following cations were met. two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. 149 WARNING! • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Power Sunroof Switch (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Closing Sunroof — Partially Press and hold the switch in the forward position. Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close Opening Sunroof — Partially Press and hold the switch in the rearward position. fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position the sunroof stops moving. desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold Closing Sunroof — Express the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once will close automatically from any position. The sunroof the sunroof stops moving. will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any Opening Sunroof — Express Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs remove the obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position. 151 of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressed. rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Venting Sunroof — Express the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to Press and release the Vent button in the center of the minimize the buffeting or open any window. switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunroof Maintenance ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets the glass panel. on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse. Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power when the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: • To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and element must be used. Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 sunroof is fully closed. Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Front Power Outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console. 155 Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Front Cupholders I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows. CONSOLE FEATURES Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use and shifting ease. Sliding Console Armrest Rear Cupholders I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Console Storage The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI). UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and iPhone威 devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3 Center Console I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 157 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION! Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 165 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 178 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 ▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ System Warnings (Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/RBZ) — AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/ NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 206 ▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 193 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio . . . . . 194 䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 197 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 197 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 205 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 217 ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 217 䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 224 ▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 161 ▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 232 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 2 3 4 — Air Outlets — Instrument Cluster — Glove Compartment — Radio 5 6 7 8 — — — — Heated Seat Switch ESP OFF Switch Hazard Warning Switch Climate Control I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 — Ignition Switch 10 — Trunk Release Button 11 — Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE 4 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 165 trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer. 1. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. 3. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 2. Trip Odometer Button 4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light Premium Cluster This light will turn on when the electronic Press this button to change the display from odometer to speed control is on. either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer 5. Tachometer to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to The red segments indicate the maximum permissible reset it. engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear Base Cluster range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed. area. Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the 6. Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately. place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. In this case, you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if 7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light the light does not come on during starting. This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check 8. Temperature Gauge when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/ The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaRUN position. This light will also turn on while ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine is running if there is a problem with the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaIf the light comes on while the engine is running, safely ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service. 167 WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 9. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. NOTE: • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10. Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 11. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information). 12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light / Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. They should go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. WARNING! If the warning light remains on, the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS. You should adjust your speed and stopping distance to account for this lack of the feature or you could be in an accident and be seriously injured. You should take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. 14. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. 15. High Beam Indicator This indicator will turn on when the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam. 16. Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before 18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is This indicator will illuminate when the front fog properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if lights are on. the odometer must be reset at zero. 19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center Vehicle Odometer Messages (EVIC) Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist, the following The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has messages will display in the odometer: been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator information. gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- Lo tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur- noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, 17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission Only The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for further information. ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. 171 TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles. noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or gASCAP damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel eter display area. For further information on fuses and filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display Vehicle”. area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CHAngE OIL (Base Cluster) Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat these steps. 20. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the If the light remains on when the parking brake has been following procedure: disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position (do master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake not start the engine). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. 173 WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerThe dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System dropped below a specified level. (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by the brake fluid level checked. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apIf brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesproximately two seconds. The light should then turn off sary. unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light also will turn on when the parking brake is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) tion. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when 21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumimately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving until the vehicle is disarmed. on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect should be checked monthly, when cold and the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition OBD system monitors engine and automatic switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when on for as long as four seconds. the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked functioning and service is required. However, the conpromptly. ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have not require towing. the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 24. Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 177 26. Door Ajar Indicator This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar. 27. Decklid Ajar Indicator This light will turn on to indicate that the decklid may be ajar. 4 28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays • Tire Pressure Monitor System • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Compass Display • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped) • Audio Mode Display I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 • Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Driver- SCROLL Button Selectable Surround [DSS]) Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps The system allows the driver to select information by (If Equipped), System Status Messages, and pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable wheel. Features). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the Controls”. mode displayed will change between Trip AUDIO MODE Button Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the (If Equipped), System Warnings, System StaCompass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with tus, and Personal Settings. compass reading and outside temperature, this screen will display radio and media mode FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept information depending on which radio is in the vehicle. a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”. also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in Displays motion) When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Trunk Ajar (with a single chime) the following messages. • Oil Change Required • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with • Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime) either turn signal on) • Channel # Transmit • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Channel # Training • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Channel # Trained • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single • Clearing Channels chime) • Channels Cleared • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Did Not Train • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK • Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime) • Left/Right Door Ajar • Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 • Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime) Engine Oil Change Indicator System • Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime) Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. • Check TPM System (with a single chime) • ESP Off – Electronic Stability Program is deactivated • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped • Check Gascap • Key Fob Battery Low • Service Keyless System Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and • Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) Starting Your Vehicle”) refer to the following procedure. • 1–4 SKIPSHIFT 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine). • Wrong Key I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions. within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If Equipped start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read Trip Functions “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the Press and release the MENU button until one of the history information will be erased, and the averaging will following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC: continue from the last fuel average reading before the • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode reset. • Distance To Empty • Trip A • Trip B • Elapsed Time The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. • Display Units of Measure in I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 4 Fuel Saver Mode — On Fuel Saver Mode — Off This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving • Distance To Empty (DTE) in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel • Trip B tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last SELECT button. reset. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Time loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position. estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will • Display Units of Measure in continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a To make your selection, press and release the FUNCsignificant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display. • Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second window.) Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go Keyless Enter-N-Go Display icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the the new ignition switch position. new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat- Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media ing” for more information. supported by the radio). NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority. But Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction when the ignition switch position is changed, the display the vehicle is facing. Press and release the always re-appears. HOME button to display one of eight compass Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If readings and the outside temperature. HOME Equipped Button Press and release the MENU button until “Surround Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor- NOTE: The system will display the last known outside mation on the current surround mode. temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera• Stereo ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the • Video Surround displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. • Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes. The I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. 187 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC. 5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function normally. Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message Compass Variance does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly 2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass headtwo seconds. ing. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings. 2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds. 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. 5. Press and release the HOME button to exit. System Warnings (Customer Information Features) Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices. Compass Variance Map 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. • Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure. 189 FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. • Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lanTHE SPARE TIRE). guage selection. Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically features when the transmission is in PARK. when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the FUNCPress and release the MENU button until Personal SetTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. tings displays in the EVIC. Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the choices. vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or Language NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To When in this display you may select one of three lan- make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlamps Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears. Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. 191 Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears. Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.” appears. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Display ECO — If Equipped The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/ Temperature display, this message can be turned on or off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Display Units of Measure In The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/RBZ) — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit’s faceplate. The RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection. The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System (GPS)-based Navigation system. Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RER or RBZ user’s manual for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions — Voice Command System (VR) — If Equipped Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing Equipped Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User downward is displayed. Manual located on the DVD for further details. 5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in 1. Turn on the radio. daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock current setting: setting menu will appear on the screen. 1. Turn on the radio. 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disclock setting menu will appear on the screen. played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down- 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in ward is displayed. the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where played to change the current setting. the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is To Manually Set the Clock I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed the screen. as follows to change the current setting: 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you 1. Turn on the radio. want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is Uconnect™ gps — RER Only Off” are displayed to change the current setting. The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to Changing the Time Zone the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the 1. Turn on the radio. worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and clock setting menu will appear on the screen. daylight savings information is set. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. To Manually Set the Clock — RER 1. Turn on the radio. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting: 1. Turn on the radio. 2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the 5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are disthe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is played to change the current setting. displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day clock setting menu will appear on the screen. on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed 4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are as follows to change the current setting: displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen. 1. Turn on the radio. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. 4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is Off” are displayed to change the current setting. Changing the Time Zone 1. Turn on the radio. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES) 197 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC side of the radio faceplate. position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. Media Center 130 (RES) When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change. 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds. RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the TIME Button direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time AM or FM frequencies. and radio frequency. TUNE Control Clock Setting Procedure Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS SCROLL control knob. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button mid-range tones. Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Memory control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the When you are receiving a station that you wish to treble tones. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the sound level from the right or left side speakers. SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory. and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Buttons 1 - 6 Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the stations). radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than DISC Button 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded. AM/FM modes to Disc modes. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. • This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. CD player mechanism. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). away and jam the player mechanism. • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the a second CD if one is already loaded. • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of can cause damage to the player. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the CD and MP3 modes. compact disc in random order to provide an interesting TIME Button change of pace. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. RW/FF Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play. RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) Notes on Playing MP3 Files button works in a similar manner. The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 AM/FM Button file recording media and formats are limited. When Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions. Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 display.) Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension) mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension) The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 • Maximum number of files: 255 • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate. MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 48, 44.1, 32 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 MPEG Specification MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the by the following: vehicle speakers. • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to CD-R media auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the to load than non-multisession discs device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is • Number of files and folders - Loading times will not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX increase with more files and folders audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a Press this button to change the display to time of day. The single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is before writing to the disc. OFF). Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio. NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) side of the radio faceplate. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. 207 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen. Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Manual located on the DVD for further details. available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen. Equipped TIME Button Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time (if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the and radio frequency. Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. procedure, starting at Step 2. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ INFO Button SCROLL control knob. Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). will begin to blink. RW/FF 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either knob to save time change. AM or FM frequencies. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. TUNE Control The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, Clock Setting Procedure I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. 209 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button mid-range tones. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast treble tones. Music Type information. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types: Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies 16-Digit Character Display None Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Program Type Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 16-Digit Character Display Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency to save time change. station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM AM/FM Button mode. Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be Memory exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. When you are receiving a station that you wish to SETUP Button commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display the following items: window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the RND button, the station will continue to play but will not TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the be stored into pushbutton memory. hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Buttons 1 - 6 Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the stations). radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than DISC/AUX Button 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded. from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. CD player mechanism. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). away and jam the player mechanism. • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranTIME Button domly selected track. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play. RW/FF Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will Notes On Playing MP3 Files begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricworks in a similar manner. tions. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 215 a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension) ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension) mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). • Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign The radio uses the following limits for file systems: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 48, 44.1, 32 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 MPEG Specification MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) Frequency (kHz) 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain by the following: playable files). • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds. CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through to load than non-multisession discs the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File • Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available). increase with more files and folders Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or before writing to the disc. more and the radio will display song titles for each file. LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details. Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped) Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further iary device if the AUX jack is connected. details. NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 — is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the IF EQUIPPED AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ down. REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 and REZ touch-screen radio UCI Press this button to change the display to time of day. The feature, refer to the separate RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 or REZ time of day will display for five seconds (when the User’s Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an ignition is OFF). option with these radios. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the Connecting The iPod姞 vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port located on the center the provided interface cable. console. Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and to the vehicle’s UCI system (iPod威 may take a few iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not seconds to connect), the iPod威 starts charging and is fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described website for software updates. below. NOTE: NOTE: • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate • It may be necessary to remove the connector pin Uconnect Multimedia radio user’s manual for iPod or protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to external USB device support capability. connecting the cable. • Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the • If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI not communicate with the UCI system until a minifeature to control the connected device. mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using This Feature Play Mode By using the provided connection cable to connect an When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port: starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display • The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound data: system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or etc.) information on the radio display. previous track. • The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. playing a track, skips to the next track. • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device) • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, during the first two seconds of the track, will Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected button at any other time in the track, will jump to iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate. the beginning of the current track. Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) button long enough will jump to the beginning of for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps the current track. to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. holding the FF >> button. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威 • A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will mode to repeat the current playing track. jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which seconds. will play the first five seconds of each track in the • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again. jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks. beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and list. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON. fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed. List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威. • During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards (counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster. • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威. • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威. • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob • Preset 1 – Playlists • Preset 2 – Artists • Preset 3 – Albums • Preset 4 – Genres • Preset 5 – Audiobooks • Preset 6 – Podcasts I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. • To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next submenu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this system. • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod威. 223 CAUTION! • Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines. • Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the connectors. WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY) Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska. System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Please have the following information available when calling: 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID). 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. the radio to exit this screen. ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios Reception Quality While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the faceplate. following reasons: Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display. Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes. Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can mode. cause intermittent reception. Satellite Antenna • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the cause signal blockage. roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an position to operate the radio. additional three seconds will make the radio display the SEEK Buttons Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display). channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek RW/FF up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons remain tuned to the new channel until you make another causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the selection. Holding either button will bypass channels direction of the arrows. without stopping until you release it. TUNE Control (Rotary) SCAN Button Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 MUSIC TYPE Button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five Sirius subscription. seconds will allow the program format type to be seSET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory lected. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. type. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type and press and release that button. If a button is not function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name. ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type stored into pushbutton memory. (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press SETUP Button the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This following items: allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) – twice. IF EQUIPPED Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威 NOTE: Dependent on the audio source, the output may audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode. for any audio source. When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers matically. Fader control is available in surround mode for any audio source. This surround effect is available for but should be set to the center position for optimal audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or surround performance. AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster. VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system. Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level. AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen Remote Sound System Controls displays radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle. The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed positions. when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode, CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle). precautions: FUNCTION SELECT Button When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT surface. button to operate various radio, media, and 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions wiping from center to edge. (i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI). SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters, files, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions. Manual Temperature Control I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Front Blower Control Temperature Control There are four blower speeds. Use this Use this control to regulate the temcontrol to regulate the amount of air perature of the air inside the passenger forced through the system in any compartment. Rotating the knob counmode you select. The blower speed terclockwise, from top center into the increases as you move the control blue area indicates cooler temperaclockwise from the off position. tures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the temperatures. climate controls will not function during Remote Start NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) lower than expected, check the front of the A/C conposition. denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mode Control (Air Direction) Mode control allows you to choose from several selections of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode, as identified by the symbols, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the control is to a particular mode, the more air distribution you receive from that mode. Bi-Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. Floor Mode Panel Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument small amount through the defrost and side window panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, demist outlets. and turned on or off to control airflow. Mix Mode NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear window demist outlets. This setting works best in seat passengers. cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE: Defrost Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side • If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the maximum blower and temperature settings for best RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times windshield and side window defrosting. and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the • Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. • In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULARecirculation Control TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside Press this button to choose between outside air because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For intake or recirculation of the air inside the maximum defogging, select the outside air position. vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in • In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULARECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIRTION button is pressed and the mode control is set to CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically. odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- Max A/C For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULAing the mode control selection. TION mode buttons at the same time. Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to Remote Start — If Equipped turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. During remote start operation, the climate control softRotate the temperature control knob to the desired ware may override the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. The table below temperature. explains the different scenarios that could occur during Air Conditioning Operation remote start operation. Push on this button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A light will illu- Once the driver enters the vehicle, the control will return minate when the A/C System is en- to the customer selected settings. This feature was degaged signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme conditions. To enable the feature, customers must park their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the four blower speeds. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If Outside Ambient Temperature Is Less than 40°F Between 40°F and 80°F More than 80°F Mode Overrides To Temperature Overrides To Mix No Override Bi-Level Full Heat No Override Full Cool 237 Rear Window Defroster Active Yes No No Summer Operation NOTE: • The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles the blower control set to the “O” (or OFF) position. must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect • For maximum performance, it is recommended that against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. “High” (full clockwise) position. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Operating Tips Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Winter Operation suggested control settings for various weather condi- Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window tions. fogging. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors. Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions 4 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 245 䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 246 ▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Keyless Go™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 257 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below −20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 260 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 274 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 274 䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ AutoStick威 — 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ AutoStick威 — 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 280 䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 ▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 243 ▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 291 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 292 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 304 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 310 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . 315 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 322 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 316 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 321 䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 322 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 245 Manual Transmission – If Equipped Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. Normal Starting with Integrated Key – Manual Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Automatic Transmission – If Equipped The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) before shifting into any driving gear. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Keyless Go™ – If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. 247 Installing and Removing the ENGINE START/STOP Button Installing the Button 1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch. 2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable. 3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position. Removing the Button 1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use. 2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the button loose. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button – Manual be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF Transmission Only position. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the Normal Starting accelerator pedal. Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission Only To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10 accelerator pedal. to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proceTo start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or dure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press- to the engine starting, release the button. ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle START/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after Only 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release prior to the engine starting, press the button again. the ENGINE START/STOP button. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. 249 To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button – Manual Transmission Only 1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/ STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. 3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then apply the parking brake. NOTE: • If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN position. (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after • If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of OFF position. inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the engine is not running. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING • If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC switch position will remain in the ACC position until displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”), the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to the OFF position. to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”), the Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK or • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time NEUTRAL Position) The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START. displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”). To change the ignition switch positions without starting Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C) the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps. To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to Do In Emergencies” for further information. 251 Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) – Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) – Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With Integrated Key) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Six-Speed Manual Transmission WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. 253 CAUTION! • Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. • Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission. • Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- Shifting creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator warms up. This is normal. pedal. The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth. The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear. Manual Shifter I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may result in transmission damage. You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting from a standing position. MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 mph 20 25 3.73 (km/h) (32) (40) mph 20 37 3.91 (km/h) (32) (59) 255 5-6 42 (67) 48 (77) Recommended Shift Speeds Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recomHigher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired mended shift speed chart. acceleration rate. NOTE: • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less. The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed • Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, during these times. you may hear your transmission. This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is diswith the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it played, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis- to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an another forward gear. indication of a problem with your clutch or Downshifting transmission. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down1–4 Skip Shift shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep There are times when you must shift the transmission grade. directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Go™), as compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Go™). This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 257 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You could have an accident. CAUTION! • If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch. • Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could damage the engine and/or clutch. CAUTION! Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING • Shift lever position WARNING! It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. • Accelerator position • Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and the road characteristics. NOTE: • After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold. General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn tomatically, dependent upon: the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission • Altitude engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after • Vehicle loading restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first. • Driving style I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING • The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles. The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release. 259 WARNING! Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle. Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied. Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift Over-Temperature Mode lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position. The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature, the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING This may result in a slightly different feeling or response other ignition position (ACC, ON/RUN) position, and during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the the brake pedal must be pressed whether or not the transmission cools down, it will return to normal engine is running. operation. Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override Key Ignition Park Interlock There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the remove the override cover which is located to the right of ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the the shift lever. shift lever is locked in PARK. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System (RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift engine. Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the 2. Firmly set the parking brake. PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) and the en- 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. gine is not running. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to any I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 261 4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab 5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position. through the access port on the center console. 6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 7. Reinstall the override cover. With Keyless Go™ – If Equipped If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/ STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the instructions shown above to activate the override. Interlock Manual Override I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Five-Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Shift Lever I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING! CAUTION! Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless Go™) to the ON position (RUN position with Keyless Go™). The following indicators should be used to ensure that REVERSE you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for proseated. longed periods with engine running. Engine may be • Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must panel to ensure it is in the PARK position. leave the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use the ERS or AutoStick威 mode and select the “3” range. Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation, you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway achieve maximum efficiency. driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. 265 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Move the shift lever into the desired range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer transmission, use the following procedure: as soon as possible. 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position. If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! AutoStick姞 — 3.5L Engine Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a AutoStick威 allows you to move the shift lever to the left slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their (-) or right (+) when the shift lever is in the DRIVE grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident position, this allows the selection of the desired top gear. or personal injury. For example, if you shift the transmission into third gear, the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum shift down to second or first gear automatically, when deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the needed. shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the Operation range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. Switching from AutoStick威 to DRIVE can be done at any AutoStick姞 — 5.7L Engine vehicle speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to AutoStick威 AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers mode, move the shift lever to the left (-) once. The current manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of gear will be maintained as the top gear. To disable the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine AutoStick威, simply press and hold the shift lever to the braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, right (+) until ⬙D⬙ is displayed in the instrument cluster and improve overall vehicle performance. This system odometer. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 267 can also provide you with more control during passing, disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off trailer towing, and many other situations. the accelerator pedal. Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the WARNING! transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission or personal injury. will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the • You can start out in first or second gear. The system selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chowill ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle sen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the speed. vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and • The transmission will automatically downshift to first will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to gear when coming to a stop. the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift • Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy (D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. To conditions. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is engaged. • The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is engaged. • Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when AutoStick威 is engaged. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 269 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. WARNING! Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water, and if there are any obstacles in the way, before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 271 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system. pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoWARNING! rized dealer. Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further • information. 273 flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake When the parking brake is applied and the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless on the transmission locking mechanism may make it Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is cluster will illuminate. not in the vehicle. NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission – If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. Automatic Transmission – If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. Parking Brake Release Parking Brake I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. • Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light.” In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). ABS is activated during braking under certain road or Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inThe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose vehicle stability and brake performance under most debris, or panic stops. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock: • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop), • The clicking sound of solenoid valves, • Brake pedal pulsations, and • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. 277 WARNING! • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. • Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on. If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as type and tires must be properly inflated to produce possible. accurate signals for the computer. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 279 If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic Operating” for further information. brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the WARNING! Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The and control in various driving conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resultAn additional electronic brake control feature called Hill ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of models. an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a This can help reduce braking distances. limited-slip differential (LSD) and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability is released, the BAS is deactivated. Program)” in this section for more information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 281 brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backOnly ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds. WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward). 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Start the engine. Disabling/Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 5. Release the clutch pedal. 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left. 7. Press the “ESP OFF” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls) four times within 20 seconds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times. For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an following steps: additional half-turn to the right. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 283 9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting properly, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will blink sev- the condition of oversteer or understeer. eral times to confirm HSA is disabled. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. 10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it’s previous setting. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If Equipped This system enhances directional control and stability of The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the maintain the desired path. accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares conditions. it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP system has two available operating modes: ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows. The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the “ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will turn off. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 285 mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momentarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light ESP OFF Switch remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving authorized dealer as soon as possible. with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP/TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/ BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should go out with the engine running. NOTE: • The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously. • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicamaneuver that caused the ESP activation. tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels, as this can result in rear axle damage. Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation: P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — ⬙R⬙ means radial construction I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 289 TIRE SIZING TERMS —⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load = Light load tire C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tire Terminology and Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running from the sill to the roof. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or KPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar. Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear Tire and Loading Information Placard I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 293 axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of To determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed [295 kg]). the weight referenced here. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occucalculated in Step 4. pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and manual to determine how this reduces the available passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 295 5 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Safety WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. 297 Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side “B” Pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” section of this manual. The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low. tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds WARNING! within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires. dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your WARNING! authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiCompact Spare Tire – If Equipped mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with tires could cause them to fail. You could have a radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein75 mph (120 km/h). stalled at the first opportunity. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h). Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Emergencies” for further information. conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. 5 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Life Of Tire Replacement Tires The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many factors including, but not limited to: characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on • Distance driven “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. WARNING! The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend You could lose control and have a collision resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire in serious injury or death. specifications or capability. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 304 STARTING AND OPERATING SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what smooth, quiet ride. was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte(120 km/h). nance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomthe following diagram. mended cold placard pressure. Tire Rotation The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. 307 NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.” I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 308 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in instrument cluster and a chime will sound when the tire. tire pressure is low in one or more of the four Base System active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure system receives the updated tire pressures, the system readings to the receiver module. will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the and to maintain the proper pressure. TPMS to receive this information. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module, • Four TPM sensors, and • TPM Telltale Light Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 309 turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road system fault can occur due to any of the following: tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON. next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. materials that may block radio wave signals. 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off wheel housings. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM Vehicles with Compact Spare Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for compact spare tire. up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Premium System – If Equipped Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to instrument cluster and a chime will sound when monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each tire pressure is low in one or more of the four wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or readings to the receiver module. more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly pressure values flashing. and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module, • Four TPM sensors, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and • TPM Telltale Light I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 313 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three compact spare tire. seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road pressure value. tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the flashing pressure value. EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure 15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS- 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes information. (- -) in place of the pressure value. Vehicles with Compact Spare I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 314 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.5L and 5.7L Engine (with Automatic RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Transmission) following conditions: The 3.5L and 5.7L engine (with automatic • This device may not cause harmful interference. transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory • This device must accept any interference received, fuel economy and performance when usincluding interference that may cause undesired ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having operation. an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacThe TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum ing licenses: performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 gasoline in these engines. Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 315 as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- Reformulated Gasoline ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.” before considering service for the vehicle. Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are speOver 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World prove air quality. Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoand durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will promends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci- vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. fications, if they are available. 5.7L Engine (with Manual Transmission) The 5.7L engine (with manual transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 316 STARTING AND OPERATING • operate in a lean mode CAUTION! Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on • poor engine performance • poor cold start and cold drivability • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the E-85 perform the following: manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it does not have the negative effects of • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) methanol. • change the engine oil and oil filter E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles • disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containengine controller memory ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged content may void the vehicle’s warranty. exposure to E-85 fuel. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. 317 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions 5 CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings CAUTION! (Continued) • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Fuel Filler Cap – Base Model 320 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). • A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system. • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Fuel Filler Cap – R/T Model NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 321 • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE: • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 322 STARTING AND OPERATING VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle indicated. • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Vehicle Certification Label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the The label contains the following information: GVWR. • Name of manufacturer • Month and year of manufacture • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. 323 Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you The best way to figure out the total weight of your have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect it is not over the GVWR. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue and GAWRs. weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not TRAILER TOWING exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for Manual Transmission – If Equipped further information. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. In this section, you will find safety tips and information Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temreview this information to tow your load as efficiently porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. hicles used for trailer towing. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. you in understanding the following information: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 325 NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) Tongue Weight (TW) The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball allowance for the presence of a driver. by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10% Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear this as part of the load on your vehicle. axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further maximum width of the front of a trailer. information. Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be WARNING! installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue It is important that you do not exceed the maximum that typically provides adjustable friction associated with front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose swaying motions while traveling. control of the vehicle and have an accident. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. WARNING! • An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident. • Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information. Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg) Duty Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg) Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg) Heavy Duty Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. 327 All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission Frontal Area 3.5L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Max. Tongue Wt. 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) STARTING AND OPERATING Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: 329 CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. 2. GTW 3. GAWR (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.) 331 − Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper inspection procedure. − When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher Towing Requirements – Tires load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GVWR and GAWR limits. spare tire. Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible ating” for proper tire inflation procedures. personal injury. − Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING − An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 5 Four-Pin Connector 1 — Female Pins 2 — Male Pin 3 — Ground I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 4 — Park 5 — Left Stop/Turn 6 — Right Stop/Turn 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use the AutoStick威 mode to select a lower gear range. Seven-Pin Connector 1 2 3 4 — — — — Battery Backup Lamps Right Stop/Turn Electric Brakes 5 — Ground 6 — Left Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : STARTING AND OPERATING 335 specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow- − Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to ing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle maintenance intervals. speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped speed when road conditions and RPM level allows. − Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Cooling System − When using the speed control, if you experience speed To reduce potential for engine and transmission overdrops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until heating, take the following actions: you can get back to cruising speed. − City Driving − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission maximize fuel efficiency. into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. AutoStick威 − Highway Driving − By using the AutoStick威 mode and selecting a specific Reduce speed. gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The − Air Conditioning highest gear range should be selected that allows for Turn off temporarily. adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 5 336 STARTING AND OPERATING The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installation. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal transmission damage. and reinstallation procedures, including flange orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound, WARNING! proper bolt torque specifications, etc. If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause serious injury or death. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 ▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 䡵 TIREFIT Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 ▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 ▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 341 ▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 351 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ Without The Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the may wear down your battery. switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS panel. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all directional tion. turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • On the highways — slow down. turn off the Hazard Warning flasher. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition: other motorists. • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the system adds heat to the engine cooling system and Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F (116 °C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200– 230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F (116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 1⁄4” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk. 341 TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation 6 1. Sealant Bottle TIREFIT Location 2. Deflation Button — If Equipped 3. Pressure Gauge 4. Power Button I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Mode Select Knob 6. Sealant Hose (Clear with Yellow Cap) 7. Air Pump Hose (Black) 8. Power Plug Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose with the yellow cap) (6) when selecting this mode. Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses Your TIREFIT kit may be equipped with either of the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Using the Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to Selecting Air Mode turn ON the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this Power Button (4) again to turn OFF the TIREposition for air pump operation only. FIT kit. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. Using the Deflation Button — If Equipped Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Usage Precautions • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) is a one tire application use. After each use, always immediately replace these components at an authorized dealer. 343 • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or like inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1⁄4” (6mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses. water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from WARNING! the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the discarded. vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem to avoid the danger of being hit when using the on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kit. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: − If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approximately 0.24 in. (6 mm) or larger. − If the tire has any sidewall damage. − If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. − If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. − If the wheel has any damage. − If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat source. • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. • Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the bottom of the air pump) when operating the TIREFIT kit. Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT 345 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn OFF the ignition. 4. Set the parking brake. (B) Setting Up to Use TIREFIT: 1. Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the bottom of the air pump) and 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle’s place them on your hands. Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode position. (A) Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT: I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL. yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 4. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the deflated tire. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. 5. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. valve stem. 6. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and then insert the plug into If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. nails) from the tire. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the (C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode tire: Select Knob (5) is in the sealant mode position and not air • Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn ON the TIREFIT FIT kit. kit. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approxipower outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if avail- mately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. the TIREFIT kit. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to use. Call for assistance. operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on air mode and pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes: Sealant Hose (6): • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive 1. Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer the vehicle further. Call for assistance. flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. CAUTION! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Securing TIRE(D) Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire: FIT Sealant in the Tire”. Immediately after injecting sealant, and inflating tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until having the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 349 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher: 1. Press the Power Button (4) to on and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening. NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation (E) After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire: Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Follow Step (A) “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT” Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the before continuing. recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and position. then reinstall the cap on the valve stem. 2. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) and connect it to the 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the valve stem. vehicle. 3. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the 3. Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose (6) to earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser- depress the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of vice center. it accordingly. 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.” NOTE: When having the tire serviced advise the autho- 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) to the housing so that rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the using the TIREFIT service kit. bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing. Then, (F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement: press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6). heard, indicating the bottle is locked in place. 2. Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in 6. Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). the hoses (6) (7) from their storage area. 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 351 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire. NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1. Open the trunk. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap. Spare Tire Fastener Opening The Access Panel I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Remove the spare tire. 5. Remove the fastener securing the jack. 353 WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. WARNING! Jack Fastener Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. Jacking and Changing a Tire 3. Set the parking brake. WARNING! 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench. WARNING! (Continued) • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. Jack Warning Label Center Cap Removal I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Lug Nut Removal/Installation 1 — Tighten 2 — Loosen I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. 357 WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off. 7. Mount the spare tire. NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the Jack Engagement Locations procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire tion” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure. and install the spare tire. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity. • Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation pressure. 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base • This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed. down the fastener. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. 359 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4. 2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If Equipped NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The 1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If 2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked 3 — Wheel Lug Nut with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the service station. valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack force to install the center cap. follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and 8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base precautions. of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening CAUTION! down the fastener. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations for Jump-Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting. NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. 1 — Remote Negative (-) Post 2 — Remote Positive (+) Post Remote Battery Posts I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 363 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence: negative (-) post of the booster battery. 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with charged battery. the discharged battery. 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REvehicle. VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinyou should have the battery and charging system in- ning the wheels, is most effective. spected at your authorized dealer. CAUTION! CAUTION! Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 6 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability Program,” or “Traction Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following limitations: With The Key Fob Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: • The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL • The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) CAUTION! Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 367 If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km) or faster than 30 mph (48 km/h), the vehicle must be transported using a flatbed truck. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the front fascia will result. • If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km) or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may result. • Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) 6 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL. Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 374 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 ▫ Clutch Hydraulic System – Manual Transmission (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 399 ▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 416 ▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 ▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . 407 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 409 䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 Fluid Capacities 371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 422 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 7 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L 1 2 3 4 5 — Integrated Power Module — Air Cleaner Filter — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover — Engine Coolant Reservoir — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 7 8 9 — — — — Engine Oil Fill Engine Oil Dipstick Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) Washer Fluid Reservoir I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L 7 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Integrated Power Module Coolant Pressure Cap Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover Engine Coolant Reservoir Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replaceproblem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test. the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To may also turn on the MIL. check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE do the following: PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Insert the key fob into the ignition switch. an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. do not crank or start the engine. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to happen: update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle not proceed to the I/M station. serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully running. illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II REPLACEMENT PARTS system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled station. maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an sure the designed performance. Damage or failures authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 377 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : (Continued) 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Checking Oil Level – 3.5L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, fully warmed engine is shut off. whichever occurs first. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range on these engines. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 5.7L Engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiLubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. should not be used. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. 381 Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil Materials Added to Engine Oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient neered product and its performance may be impaired by service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil supplemental additives. filter and are recommended. Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Air Cleaner Filter used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 WARNING! Battery Location • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 385 Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental removed. Particular attention should also be given to I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE hood latching components to ensure proper function. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from When performing other underhood services, the hood the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering, amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods residual water. may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. 387 WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid Exhaust System containers. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in system. the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; equipped). or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age: portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in damage. motion. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Go™). The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Go™). • You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RECoolant Checks MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 391 CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. • The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are Adding Coolant anticipated. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintewill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the nance period, it is important that you use the same engine cooling system. engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainvehicle. tain the proper level of protection against freezing acPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant the vehicle is operated. (antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant changes. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. 393 WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points to Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. condenser clean. • Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) freezing. performance, poor gas mileage, and increased • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are emissions. required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system should be pressure tested for leaks. system components should be inspected periodically. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainMaster Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information. if the brake system warning light indicates system failure. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a accident. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. (Continued) (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in an accident. bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacClutch Hydraulic System – Manual Transmission turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration (If Equipped) The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu- further information. ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Change Transmission Fluid Vehicle” for further information. If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediManual Transmission – If Equipped ately. See your authorized dealer for service. Fluid Level Check Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be at the I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Transmission – If Equipped 399 CAUTION! (Continued) Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted. If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION! • The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. • Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fluid and Filter Changes Special Additives Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by suppleIf the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addifluid and filter should be changed. tives to the transmission. The only exception to this Selection of Lubricant policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- they may adversely affect seals. mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmisCAUTION! sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaDo not use chemical flushes in your transmission as tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainthe chemicals can damage your transmission compotained at the prescribed level using the recommended nents. Such damage is not covered by the New fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transVehicle Limited Warranty. mission; only the approved lubricant may be used. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 401 extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion? Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of Change Axle Fluid Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion The most common causes are: Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, • Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap, and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once scratch the paint. a month. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear finish. and open. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a considered the responsibility of the owner. mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove • If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威 similar cause that destroys the paint and protective Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as posnon-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respona bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or sibility of the owner. equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective packaged and sealed. finish. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Interior Care Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent ner: for carpeting. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp with a clean, dry towel. cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomequivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp mended for leather upholstery. cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth soap residue. and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any protectants on Stain Repel products. liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis WARNING! with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent, or any comDo not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abraMany are potentially flammable, and if used in sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and that may scratch the elements. less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean or Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild buckles do not work properly. soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with a clean damp rag. with the cupholder in the center console. 2. Dry with a soft tissue. NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES 407 CAUTION! Integrated Power Module (IPM) The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. • When installing the integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Integrated Power Module I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 1 Cartridge Fuse — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 6 — — 7 — 8 — MiniFuse Description Cavity 15 Amp Blue 25 Amp Natural 25 Amp Natural 25 Amp Natural — 25 Amp Natural 25 Amp Natural 30 Amp Green Washer Motor 9 10 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Run/Start 11 12 EGR Solenoid/ Alternator — Ignition Coils/Injectors Headlamp Washer Relay – If Equipped Starter 13 14 15 16 17 18 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Cartridge Fuse — 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red — 50 Amp Red — — — MiniFuse Description — — — Windshield Wiper — Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves Radiator Fan Lo/High — — — — Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor — Radiator Fan — — — — — — MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 19 20 21 22 Cartridge Fuse — — — — MiniFuse Description — — — — — — — — 409 Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Access Panel I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Rear Power Distribution Center • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 1 2 3 4 CarMinitridge Fuse Fuse 60 Amp — Yellow 40 Amp — Green — — 40 Amp — Green Description Cavity 6 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink — Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Cavity 1 of the Rear Power Distribution Center contains a black IOD fuse needed for vehicle processing during assembly. The service replacement part is a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse. Integrated Power Module (IPM) — Integrated Power Module (IPM) 5 7 — 8 — 9 — 10 11 * 12 * — — — I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MiniFuse 411 Description — Heated Seats – If Equipped 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow 15 Amp Sub Amp – If Equipped Blue 15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow — — — — — — 7 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 13 * 14 Cartridge Fuse — — 15 16 17 — — — 18 — 19 — 20 21 22 — — — MiniFuse Description Cavity — — 10 Amp AC Heater Control/ Red Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped — — — — 20 Amp Cluster Yellow 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet Yellow 10 Amp Stop Lights Red — — — — — — 23 24 25 26 27 Cartridge Fuse — — — — — 28 — 29 — I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MiniFuse Description — — — — 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red — — — — Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Ignition Run, AC Heater Control/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP LIGHT Switch 5 Amp Orange MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 30 Cartridge Fuse — 31 32 33 34 35 — — — — — 36 — 37 — MiniFuse Description Cavity 10 Amp Door Modules/Power Red Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM) — — — — — — — — 5 Amp Antenna Module – If Orange Equipped/Power Mirrors 25 Amp Hands-Free Phone – If Natural Equipped/Radio/ Amplifier Feed 15 Amp Transmission Blue 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Cartridge Fuse — MiniFuse 413 Description 10 Amp Cargo Light/Vehicle InRed formation Module – If Equipped — 10 Amp Heated Mirrors – If Red Equipped — 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview Orange Mirror/Heated Seats – If Equipped/Switch Bank — — — 30 Amp — Front Blower Motor Pink 30 Amp — Rear Window Defroster Pink 20 Amp — Amplifier/Sunroof – If Blue Equipped 7 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE * Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window switch, and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service. in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 VEHICLE STORAGE Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220 If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 battery. Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder . . . . . . . . LED • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the for replacement instructions. air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass BULB REPLACEMENT cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and should not be used for replacement. Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number Headlamps — If Equipped Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement. Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10 HID Headlamps (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 an authorized dealer for service. Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: • If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint. 2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replaceNOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, ment bulb. when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. 5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker. Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp 1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side to disengage the clip. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 1. Open the trunk. 2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer. 4. Pull back the trunk liner. 5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly. 3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to 7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. access the bulbs. 8. Disconnect the electrical connector. 9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly. 10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical Center Tail/Backup Lamp See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement. connector, and trunk liner. 13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer. Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. 7 14. Close the trunk. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Lamp 1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia. 2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 1 — License Lamp Bulb 2 — Socket 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly. 5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install the screws. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) 3.5 Liter Engine 5.7 Liter Engine Engine Oil with Filter 3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) Cooling System * 3.5 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : U.S. Metric 18.5 Gallons 19 Gallons 70 Liters 72 Liters 6 Quarts 7 Quarts 5.7 Liters 6.6 Liters 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters 7 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm]) Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]) Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended – Automatic Transmission) Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine – 91 Octane Manual Transmission) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Rear Axle – 3.5L Engine Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product. MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product. MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product. MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 (API GL-5) or equivalent. MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) or equivalent (with MOPAR威 Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive). I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 7 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : M A I N T E N A N C ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 428 E MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 426 䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 S C H E D U L E S 8 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : M A I N T E N A N C E 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type, must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control System. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip C H driving. E D U L E S 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that serNOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emisvice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles performed by any automotive repair establishment or (805 km). individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE: • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. 427 M A I N T E N A At Each Stop for Fuel N C • Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your VeS hicle” for further information. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichrequired. ever comes first. Once a Month Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle as required. Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Required Maintenance Intervals master cylinder, and power steering, and add as Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. needed. • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation. At Each Oil Change S • Change the engine oil filter. C H • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. E D CAUTION! U L Failure to perform the required maintenance items E S may result in damage to the vehicle. 8 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code 429 M 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or N T 18 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. E 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine). ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 431 M Date Dealer Code ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. ❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or N T 42 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C E 48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine). Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km). ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 433 M Date Dealer Code Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or N T 66 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C E 72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 M 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center Date Dealer Code Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature, Authorized Service Center I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code 8 M 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or N T 90 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. E S C H E D U L E S 8 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine). ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. † ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped). Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L Engine). ❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine). ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code 437 M 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or N T 114 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the E S C H E D U L E S 8 following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Date Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine). Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. ❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (3.5L/5.7L Engines). ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Date Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 439 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or N T 126 Months Maintenance E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the E S C H E D U L E S 8 following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Date Dealer Code 441 M 144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : Date Dealer Code A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or N 150 Months Maintenance T E Service Schedule N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A filter. N ❏ Rotate tires. C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. E ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine). S C H E D U L E S 8 ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Odometer Reading Repair Order # Date † This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty. WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 445 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 446 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 446 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it Prepare For The Appointment is advisable to make these arrangements when you call If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the for an appointment. right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services. current problem. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner. vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 423–6343 ship. They want to know if you need assistance. Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center • If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621 concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 center. Phone: (800) 465–2001 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 ter should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109 • Owner’s name and address Mexico, D. F. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 • Authorized dealership name • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. 447 the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800485-2001). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR姞 PARTS MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer. 449 defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). http://www.safercar.gov. • Service Manuals In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the should contact the Customer Service Department immeinformation that students and professional technicians diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Call toll free at: • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com • Owner’s Manuals I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. 451 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades. mance. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on WARNING! the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics. actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 9 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX 10 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 454 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,276 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,279 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 392 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 382 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,385 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,384 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,56 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,60,73,168 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,56 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 50,53,56 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,421 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,279 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,278 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX 455 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,73 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,395 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,279 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,423 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,276 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,395 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,399,400 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,423 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 265 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 456 INDEX Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,415 Check Engine Light Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,414 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,63,66,68 Caps, Filler Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Cleaning Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,194,198,208 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,318 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,232 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 218 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 393 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,394 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 457 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 391,421,422 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,406 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,234 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 458 INDEX Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 409 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 137 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 166 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 178 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Emergency, In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 375,426 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,373 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Dipsticks Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 182 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,373 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,422 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,318 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,421,422 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,379 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,421 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 459 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 57 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,318 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,387 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,422 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,130,167 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 460 INDEX Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 422 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,170 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,422 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,374 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,25,113,314 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,325 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,324 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 461 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 131 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,135 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 462 INDEX Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . 326 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . 155 . . . 142 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . . . 126 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,165 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,185,247 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .. ... 232 252 131 281 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,414 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,127 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,60,73,168 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,278 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 463 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,276 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,415 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,141 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,131 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 286 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 166 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,170 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,415 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,135 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,169 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 464 INDEX High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,165 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,141 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 176 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,141 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 133 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,141 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,415 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 176 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 174,305 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,130,167 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 165 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 176,375 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,398,401 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,401 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,141 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 465 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Mode Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,448 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,53,57 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,53,56 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,422 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,170 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,170 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 466 INDEX Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,181 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,181 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,422 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,379 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,422 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,421 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,421 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,339 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,449 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 292 Power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX 467 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Radio, Satellite (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . 224 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 230 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 393 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 152 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,272 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 468 INDEX Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Satellite Radio (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,37,73 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62,63,68 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 391,422 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,194,198,208 469 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,262 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 238 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,130,167 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Sound System Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,351 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,245 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 470 INDEX Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,272 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,414 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 47 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 166,340 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 292 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,296,451 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,354 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,354 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 471 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,296 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 336 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 472 INDEX Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Transfer Case Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,262,399 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 142 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,170 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,35 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,167 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 218 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : INDEX Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,322,323 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,414 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,135,386 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 473 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,151 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,135 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 I nf or mat i onPr ov i dedby : 10 Chrysler Group LLC 10D491-126-AD 4th Edition I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby : Printed in U.S.A.